Page 1 ‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬ E N G L I S H ‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬ E N G L I S H ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ USER GUIDE LG-C660 LG-C660 www.lg.com www.lg.com P/N : MFL67300830 (1.1) P/N : MFL67300830 (1.1)
Page 2 Bluetooth QD ID B017971...
Page 3 ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ LG-C660 LG-C660 .‫ﺳﻴﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‬ .www.lg.com ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺣﺘﺠﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ، ﻳ ُ ﺮﺟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬...
Page 4 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ 35 ...... ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ 6 ..‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ 36 ..‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜ ّ ﻠﺔ‬ 13 ....... ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ‬ 36 ..... ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ، ﻳﺮﺟﻰ‬ 37 ... Google ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ 22 ....! ً ‫ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﻭﻻ‬ 37 ..
Page 5 52 ....... ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ 42 ..‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ/ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ 52 ..‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮ ّ ﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤ ﺪ ّ ﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ 42 ......‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ 53 ....‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ 42 ..... ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ 53 ....‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ 43 ....‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺍﺑﻂ‬ 53 ..‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ 43 ..‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ...
Page 6 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ 66 ......‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ 58 ......‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ 58 ...... ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬ 66 . ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‬ 59 ....‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ 66 ....‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ 59 ....‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ‬ 66 ......‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ 59 ....‫ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺌﺔ‬ 66 ....‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ 60 ..... ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ 66 ....‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ...
Page 7 71 .....‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ 71 ... ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬DivX ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬ 71 ....73 ......‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ 74 ......‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬ 75 ..‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬...
Page 8 International ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ﺪ ّ ﺩ‬ Commission on ‫(. ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ‬SAR) Non-Ionizing Radiation ‫ ﻫﺬﺍ‬LG-C660 ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬ Protection (ICNIRP) ‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻔﻲ ﺑﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﻮ 2 ﻭﺍﻁ/ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺟﺮﺍﻡ ﻭﻫﻮ ﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮ ّ ﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ‬...
Page 9 • ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻤﻮﻟﺔ‬ • ‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺇﺫ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫، ﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ‬LG ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻔﺎﻟﺔ، ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ً ﻟـ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺎ ً ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬ ً ‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﻮﺍء ﺃﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺓ‬ .‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺓ ً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬...
Page 10 ‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ • ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ • ‫ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ )ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ. ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻨﺮ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻭﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ .(‫ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ‬...
Page 11 ‫ﻣﺪﺭﻛﺎ ً ﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﻚ. ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻗﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻣﻠﺰﻣﺎ ً ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻗﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻨ ّ ﺐ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺴﻤﻌﻚ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﺎ ً ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻻ ً ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬ •...
Page 12 ‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ .‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺠﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ‬ .‫ﺗﺘﺴ ﺒ ّﺐ ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺠﻴﺮ ﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ. ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻡ‬ .‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ، ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ •...
Page 13 ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ‬ • LG ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺷﻮﺍﺣﻦ‬ • ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ، ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ ﻣﺼ ﻤ ّ ﻤﺔ‬LG ‫ﻓﻘﻂ. ﻓﺸﻮﺍﺣﻦ‬ .‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ .‫ﻹﻃﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ، ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬ • ‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬...
Page 14 ‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ً ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻋﻦ‬ • ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ .‫ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬ • ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ .‫ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ‬...
Page 15 ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ، ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ "ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ" ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﻭﺻﻒ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻬﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫2.
Page 16 ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ • ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺪءﺍ ً ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺪﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻻ ً ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ .‫ﻳﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ...
Page 17 ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ: ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﺧﺬ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ :‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ، ﻗﻢ‬ .‫ﻧﻘﺶ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬ Android ‫ﻣﻮﺛﻮﻗﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ، ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻡ ﺟ ﺪ ً ﺍ ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬ ‫. ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬Market ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ. ﻟﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ...
Page 18 ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻹﻃﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ‬ + ‫+ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺸﺮ‬ ‫ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ‬ ،LG ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ. ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ‬ Wi-Fi .‫ﺣﺮﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ، ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬...
Page 19 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ :‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ .‫ﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ، ﺳﺘﺘﻢ‬ • ‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺘﻚ ﺑﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. ﻓﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳ ُﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ .‫ﻟﻤﺲ...
Page 20 ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ .‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺣﺎﻟ ﻴ ًﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺗﻚ‬ • ‫ ﻣﻦ‬LG PC Suite ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ LG PC Suite ‫9. ﻧﺴﺦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ microSD ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ SD ‫ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ ﻫﻮ ﺃﺣﺪ‬LG PC Suite IV ‫...
Page 21 ‫ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬USB ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ • ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ: ﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ .USB ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ،USB ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬ LG PC ‫ﻓﺈﻧﻚ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ • ‫ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. ﻗﻢ‬Suite ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‬...
Page 22 ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫11. ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ USB ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬USB ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ،‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺇﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺘﻠﻘﻰ ﺇﻋﻼ ﻣ ً ﺎ ﻳﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﺈﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ .USB ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬...
Page 23 ‫31. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺠ ﻤ ّ ﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ USB ‫ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ .‫ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺠﻤﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﻟﻤﺲ‬ :‫ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬ .USB ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ً ‫ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ، ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ...
Page 24 ‫ < ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬USB ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ‬ .‫ < ﻓﺘﺢ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬USB .‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ LG ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ Android Platform Driver ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ‬...
Page 25 .‫/ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬Bluetooth > ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ، ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬ PC Suite ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ. ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ LG-C660 ‫ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬IV ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫(، ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺮ‬USB ‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﻕ "ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ" ﺃﻭ "ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ‬...
Page 26 ! ً ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ، ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﻭﻻ‬ ‫ )ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬FTP ‫* ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑـ‬ ‫ ﻓﻘﻂ(: ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬FTP ‫ﺧﺎﺩﻡ‬ ‫< ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‬ ‫< ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ‬ ‫"ﺇﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ"؛ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. ﺍﻋﺜﺮ‬ ‫...
Page 27 ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬ .‫ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬LG-C660 ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ،‫ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺬ ّ ﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬LG-C660 ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬ . ٍ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ً ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻌﺪ 5 ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬...
Page 28 ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ﺮ ّ ﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺱ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ/ﺍﻹﻗﻔﺎﻝ‬ ‫- ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ .‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ :‫- ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫- ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ .‫ﻭﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ‬...
Page 29 ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬ SIM ‫ﺃﺩﺧ ِ ﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬SIM ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫. ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ‬SIM ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ، ﺍﻣﺴﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﻣﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ،‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ. ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﺑﺈﺑﻬﺎﻣﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ. ﻭﺣﻴﻨﺌ ﺬ ٍ ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﻏﻄﺎء‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ...
Page 30 ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ،‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ. ﻳﺠﺐ‬ ‫ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ‬LG-C660 ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻯ‬ .‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ: ﻳﺠﺐ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬ .‫ﺃﻭﻻ ً ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬...
Page 31 ‫ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ .‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ :‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ LG-C660 ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ: ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ 32 ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺳﻌﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ .‫ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ .‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﺒﻞ‬...
Page 32 ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ﺮ ّ ﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ . ً ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻬﻴﺄﺓ ﺃﺻﻼ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ، ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ‬ .‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ: ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ .‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ...
Page 33 ‫ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻹﻗﻔﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ‬ ‫، ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ‬LG-C660 ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ .‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ. ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ – ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ/ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻖ‬...
Page 34 .‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ، ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ( ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ: ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ LG-C660 ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ‬ .‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ، ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ .‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬...
Page 35 ‫ﺳﺘﺮﻯ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. ﺍﺳﺤﺒﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ، ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ...
Page 36 ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰﺍ ً ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ. ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ‬ .‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ، ﻣﺜﻞ ﻗﻮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ...
Page 37 ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺸﻒ‬GPS ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬GPS ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻬﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ QWERTY ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ – ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ‬shift/‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ...
Page 38 ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸ ﻜ ّ ﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻳﺔ‬ :‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﺸﻜ ّ ﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ .‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ :‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﻳﺔ‬ • ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ، ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺣﻘﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻖ؛ ﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ‬ .‫ﻧﺺ‬...
Page 39 Google ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ Google ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ‬Google ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ، ﺳ ﻴ ُﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ Google ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ. ﺳ ﻴ ُﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ...
Page 40 Google ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ • ‫ﻫﺎﻡ‬ ‫ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺮﻛﺘﻚ‬enterprise ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﻣﺜﻞ‬ • ‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ، ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻯ‬ Google ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ، ﻣﻊ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬ .‫ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ...
Page 41 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺭﻓﻀﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ، ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺭﺩ‬ .‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ .‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﻓﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ. ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺭﻗﻢ، ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻟﺮﻓﺾ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ. ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ...
Page 42 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ .‫ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ،‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ !‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ .‫ﺟﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬ .‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ، ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ. ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ...
Page 43 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ / ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﻠﺒﻬﺎ‬ ‫ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ‬Google ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ .‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ .‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء‬ ‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ .‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ...
Page 44 ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ/ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ .‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ .‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺩﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬LG-C660 ‫ﻳﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ ﻓﻲ‬MMS‫ ﻭ‬SMS ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ .‫ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ، ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ .‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺪﻳﻬﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ‬ :‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬...
Page 45 .‫ ﻭﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬MS Exchange ‫ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ً ﺎ، ﻟﺬﺍ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬LG-C660 ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬ Microsoft Exchange ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ – ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ .‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻓﻘ ً ﺎ ﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ‬...
Page 46 ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ/ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ – ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ‬SSL ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫)ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ(. ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ‬ ‫ ﻟـ‬SSL ‫ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ .‫ﻓﻮﺭ ً ﺍ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ‬ . Microsoft Exchange ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ "ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻜﺘﻤﻞ" ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ...
Page 47 ‫ﻹﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ .‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ. ﺗﺘﻢ‬ ً ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ، ﻓﺎﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ .‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ...
Page 48 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺳﻠﺔ/ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳ ُﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ‬ Exchange ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ ،‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ؛‬ ،‫ﻭﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ، ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ. ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ‬ .‫ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‬Exchange ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ،...
Page 49 :‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ "ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ"، ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ > ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ، ﺣﺪﺩ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ – ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ – ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ‬ .‫ﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫، ﻭ‬TLS ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ‬ .‫...
Page 50 ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ﺮ ّ ﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤ ﺪ ّ ﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ – ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ. ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ "-" ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺃﻗﻞ، ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ "+" ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ/ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ...
Page 51 ‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻛﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ .‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺢ ﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ. ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻭﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻚ ﻛـ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ. ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫/ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺃﻭ‬Bluetooth .‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ، ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ Facebook ‫ ﺃﻭ‬Email ‫...
Page 52 ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ – ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ .‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ، ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ 3 ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ٍ ﺃﻭ 5 ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ٍ ﺃﻭ‬ .‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫01 ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ٍ . ﻫﺬﺍ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﻥ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ...
Page 53 ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ. ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫– ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ .‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ .‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫– ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ .‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ .‫ﻳﺰﻭﺩﻙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ...
Page 54 ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ﺮ ّ ﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤ ﺪ ّ ﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ – ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ. ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ "-" ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺃﻗﻞ، ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ "+" ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ/ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ...
Page 55 ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ: ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺯﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬ .‫( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﺍﻝ‬MMS) ‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ...
Page 56 ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ، ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ. ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ، ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻮﻫﺞ ﻭﻣﺸﻤﺲ ﻭ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .‫ﻭ ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ – ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ً...
Page 57 ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ .‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬ .‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻬﺎ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ،...
Page 58 ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‬ ‫ ﻋﺮﺽ‬LG-C660 ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺳﻬﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬ .‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ،"‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﺛﻢ‬...
Page 59 ‫ ﺫﺍﺕ‬USB ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺗﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ؛ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ .‫ﻭﺗﺮﺳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‬ :USB ‫ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ LG-C660 ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ .USB .‫ﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء‬...
Page 60 ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺸ ﻐ ّ ﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻀ ﻤ ّ ﻨﺎ ً ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬LG-C660 ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ. ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺸ ﻐ ّ ﻞ‬...
Page 61 ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ً ﺎ، ﻓﺈﻧﻚ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﻣﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺄﻟﻚ "ﻫﻞ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‬ ‫ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ‬LG-C660 ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ؟". ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ‬FM ‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫"ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ"، ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‬...
Page 62 ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ،‫ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ !‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ .‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ :‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺱ‬ ‫ﻟﻢ...
Page 63 ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ،+) ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‬ ،‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ. ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ .= ‫ﺃﻭ–، ﺃﻭ *، ﺃﻭ /(، ﻳﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ LG-C660 ‫ﺳﻴﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻌﻘﻴﺪﺍ ً ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬...
Page 64 ‫ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ Polaris Viewer .‫، ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﺎﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺃﺩﺧ ِ ﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ ﺃﺣﺪ‬Polaris Viewer ‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ .‫ﻭﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ً ﺃﻳﻦ‬ .‫،...
Page 65 ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠ ّ ﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺋﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺴﺠ ّ ﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ .‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬ .‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫/ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬Bluetooth ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ Gmail‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ...
Page 66 ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻛﺴ ً ﺎ ﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ً ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﻋﺎﻟﻤﺎ ً ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ "ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ"، ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺎ ً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬ .‫ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻓﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ - ﻛﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ.
Page 67 ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫، ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ .‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‬ ، ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ، ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳ ﻤ ً ﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‬URL ‫ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋ ً ﺎ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ،‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ...
Page 68 ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ - ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ﻭ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬Bluetooth ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﻴ ً ﺎ – ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ‬ USB ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﻴ ًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬ ،Wi-Fi ‫ﺃﻭ...
Page 69 ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺶ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‬PIN ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ .‫ﺑﺪﻻ ً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺶ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻛـ ﺑﻼ‬ .‫ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ،‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ – ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺘﻚ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﻧﻘﺶ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ...
Page 70 ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗ ُ ﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻰ‬ .‫ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻼﻡ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬ ،Android ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻼﻡ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ، ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ .‫ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‬ .‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻩ‬...
Page 71 Wi-Fi !‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬ ‫، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ،Wi-Fi ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻼ ً ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ . ً ‫ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ .(AP) ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻲ...
Page 72 Wi-Fi Wi-Fi ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ ﻛﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬LG-C660 ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬ .‫ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ < ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﻭﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ < ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ LG-C660 ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ WPA/WPA2‫ ﻭ‬WEP ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫1.208. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺎﻡ‬x EAP‫ ﻭ‬PSK ‫ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻝ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬...
Page 73 ‫ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‬ ‫. ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ‬DivX ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ. ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬divx.com ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬ LG ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺗﺎﺣﺖ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬...
Page 74 ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬DivX Certified ® .240 x 320 ‫ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ‬DivX ® DivX Certified ‫ ﻭ‬DivX ® ® ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ ﻫﻲ‬ Rovi ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ ﻭﺷﺮﻛﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬Corporation .‫ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ‬ Open Source ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ !‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬ MPL‫...
Page 75 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ .LG-C660 ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ (.‫)ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬ LG-C660 ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ‬ .LG-C660 ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺱ‬ :‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ LG ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ً ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ .‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬ • .‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﻟﺔ‬...
Page 76 Suppliers Details Name LG Electronics Inc Address LG Electronics Inc. LG Twin Towers 20, Yeouido-dong, Yeongdeungpo-gu, Seoul, Korea 150-721 Product Details Product Name GSM 850 / E-GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 Quad Band and WCDMA Terminal Equipment...
Page 77 ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺮﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ً ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ، ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ‬ .‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ SIM ‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ...
Page 78 ‫ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ، ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻗﺘﻀﻰ‬ .‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ‬ .‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻠﻞ‬ .‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺴﺨﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ، ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ‬ .‫ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‬LG ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ - ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬ .‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ‬...
Page 79 ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ /‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ‬ .‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬SMS ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺬ ّ ﺭ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‬ ‫ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬SD ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ...
Page 81 LG-C660 .‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫ ﺑﺎﺯﺩﻳﺪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬www.lg.com ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ، ﺍﺯ‬ ‫• ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬...
Page 82 ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ 34 ....‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﻭ‬ 6 ........‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬ 35 ....‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ 36 ..‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﮐﺴﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭ‬ 13 ......‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﻴﻪ ﻣﻬﻢ‬ 36 ....‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ، ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ‬ 37 ..Google ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک‬ 22 ....
Page 83 52 ....‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ 42 ....‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ/ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬ 52 ....‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ‬ 42 ......‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ‬ 53 ....‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻓﻮﺭی‬ 42 ......‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ 53 ....‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ 43 ..... ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺯﻧﺠﻴﺮﻩ ﺍی‬ 54 ..‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ 43 ..‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺳﯽ‬ 54 ..
Page 84 ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ 66 ......‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎ ﺕ‬ 58 ......‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬ 59 .......‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ‬ 66 ....‫ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ 59 ....‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ 66 ....‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ 59 ..... ‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ 66 ....... ‫ﺻﺪﺍ‬ 60 ....‫ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ‬ 66 ......‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬ 60 ....‫ﮔﻮﺵ...
Page 85 71 .... ‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬ 71 ..‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ DivX ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ 71 ........73 ......‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬ 74 ......‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ‬ 75 ......‫ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ‬...
Page 86 ‫ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫(. ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬SAR) ‫ﺟﺬﺏ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ‬ ‫ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍی‬LG-C660 ‫ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﺪﻝ‬ .‫ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬...
Page 87 .‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﮕﻪ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‬ .‫ﺗﮑﻨﺴﻴﻦ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺍ ً ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺖ‬ LG ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ • ‫ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ‬ .‫ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻳﺎ‬...
Page 88 ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻫﺪﻓﻮﻥ ﺑﺎ‬ • ‫ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ‬ • ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺑﯽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﻪ‬ ،‫ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﭘﺮﻫﻴﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺩﺍﻍ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ .‫ﻭ...
Page 89 ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﮑﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭی‬ • ‫ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ، ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ، ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ، ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ‬ .‫ﮐﻨﺪ‬ .‫ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬ • ‫ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺟﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ، ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ...
Page 90 ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺒﺎﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎ‬ • ‫ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩی ﺍﺯ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺠﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺟﻨﺲ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ. ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ...
Page 91 ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎی‬ • ‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎی‬LG .‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ ‫ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍی ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‬LG ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ • ‫ﮐﻪ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ‬...
Page 92 ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ‬ • ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ، ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻤﮏ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﻓﺮﻭﺵ‬ LG ‫ﻳﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ‬ .‫ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬Electronics ‫ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻥ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ‬ • ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ، ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ‬...
Page 93 ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﻴﻪ ﻣﻬﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻟﻐﻮ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮ، ﺭﻭی ﻟﻐﻮ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻩ‬ ،‫ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ .‫ﻭ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‬ ‫2.
Page 94 ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﻴﻪ ﻣﻬﻢ‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺮﻭی ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ‬ • ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ. ﺩﺭ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ، ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺯ‬ .‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬...
Page 95 ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ: ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﻫﺎی ﻻﺯﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ‬ :‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ .‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ، ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی‬ Android ‫ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫...
Page 96 ‫ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ، ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ. ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺁﺭﻡ‬ .‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬ ،‫ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪ‬LG ‫ ﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ .‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ/ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻫﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ Wi-Fi ‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬...
Page 97 .‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ • .‫ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬Wi-Fi :‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻗﻔﻞ‬ .‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ .‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ...
Page 98 ‫ﮐﻪ ﺍﺧﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ، ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬ ‫ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬LG PC Suite ‫ﻧﺼﺐ‬ .‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ‬ ‫ ﺍﺯ‬LG PC Suite ‫9. ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. )ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﺒﻼ‬ (.‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬...
Page 99 • ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ: ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ‬ .‫ ﺭﺍ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‬USB ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی‬ ‫ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ، ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬USB ‫ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ‬LG PC suite ‫ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪ ﻭ‬USB ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ • ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ. ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬...
Page 100 ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﻴﻪ ﻣﻬﻢ‬ ‫11. ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ USB ‫ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬USB ‫ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ، ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ،‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ USB ‫ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ...
Page 101 ‫41. ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ/ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ‬ USB ‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ، ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬ .‫ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ، ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ‬ USB ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ...
Page 102 .‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ‬ LG Android Platform Driver ‫ﺍﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪﻫﺎی ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﮑﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ، ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺁﻥ‬ .‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬...
Page 103 CSV ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬ ‫)ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺭی( ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ‬ .‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ LG PC Suite IV ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ، ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ، ﺳﭙﺲ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ‬...
Page 104 !‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ، ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ FTP ‫ )ﻓﻘﻂ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ‬FTP ‫* ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫* ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ: ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ :(‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍی‬ < ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ < ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ،‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ...
Page 105 .‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ، ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ .‫ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﯽ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬LG-C660 ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ! ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ،‫ ﺧﻄﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬LG-C660 ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ! ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ .‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ 5 ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬...
Page 106 ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ/ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ/ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬ ‫- ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ‬ /‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ، ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ .‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫- ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ: ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ‬ ‫- ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ .‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍی...
Page 107 ‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻗﺎﺏ ﭘﺸﺘﯽ، ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ. ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﮑﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ. ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻃﻼﻳﯽ ﺭﻧﮓ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ،...
Page 108 .‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍ‬ .‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ‬LG-C660 .‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺏ ﭘﺸﺘﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺳﺮ ﺟﺎﻳﺶ‬ .‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬...
Page 109 ‫ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ، ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ .‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ :‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬LG-C660 ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ: ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﺎ 23 ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬ .‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬...
Page 110 ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ً ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ‬ ،‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ. ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ، ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬ .‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ،‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ: ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﭘﺎک ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ...
Page 111 ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ .‫ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬LG-C660 ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ /‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ – ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ، ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ/ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ، ﺁﻥ‬...
Page 112 .‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ .‫ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬ ‫ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬LG-C660 ‫ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬LG ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ .‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ، ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﺮﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬...
Page 113 ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩ. ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬ .‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ...
Page 114 ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩی ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ، ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﯽ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ، ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ .‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪﻳﺪ، ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ،‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ...
Page 115 ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﯽ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‬ ‫ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬GPS ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬GPS ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﮐﻮﺭﺗﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺷﻴﻔﺖ – ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﻌﺪی ﮐﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ...
Page 116 ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﮐﺴﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﺠﺎﺯی‬ ،‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﺠﺎﺯی‬ :‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﮐﺴﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻑ‬ :‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﺠﺎﺯی‬ • ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ، ﻳﮏ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ...
Page 117 Google ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک‬ Google ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک‬ ‫ ﺭﺍ‬Google ‫ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ، ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک‬ ‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬ .‫ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‬Google ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭی ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ‬ ،‫...
Page 118 Google ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺷﺮﮐﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ‬ • ‫ﻣﻬﻢ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی‬ ،‫ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ، ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ • ‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬IT ‫ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ، ﺑﺨﺶ‬ Google ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ‬ .‫ﮐﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‬ .‫ﺁﻥ...
Page 119 ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺩ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ، ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‬ ،‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ...
Page 120 ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ‬ ،‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ !‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﻭ ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ‬ ،‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮐﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺴﯽ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ .‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﭘﺎک ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ...
Page 121 ‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ‬ .‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک‬ ‫ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎی‬Google .‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ...
Page 122 ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ، ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ‬ .‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺒﯽ ﺍﺯ‬LG-C660 ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﺪﻝ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﻮی‬MMS ‫ ﻭ‬SMS ‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ. ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی‬ .‫ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬...
Page 123 .‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ MS ‫ﭘﺴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬Exchange ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ .‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ LG-C660 ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ Microsoft ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬ Exchange ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬...
Page 124 ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ/ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ – ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ. ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ .‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﺷﺪ، ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ – ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬SSL ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﮑﻤﻴﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ‬ Microsoft ‫...
Page 125 ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﮐﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺩ‬ .‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺁﻥ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﮐﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ...
Page 126 ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ/ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک‬ ‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻟﯽ‬ Exchange ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ؛ ﺩﺭ‬ ،‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ، ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ .‫ ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﻣﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬Exchange ‫ﺳﺮﻭﺭ‬ .‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ...
Page 127 :‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک‬ < ‫ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ، ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ .‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ،‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺮ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬ .‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی – ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬ .‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ – ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ‬ .‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩی...
Page 128 ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ – ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭی ﮐﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻢ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ‬ .‫ﻃﺮﻑ "-" ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ "+" ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ...
Page 129 .‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ! ﻫﻤﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ .‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ .‫ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻳﮑﺒﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ، ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬ .‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ...
Page 130 ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ، ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻤﺘﺮی‬ VGA (640 x 480)، .‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ .QVGA (320 x 240) ‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ – ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ‬ISO ‫ – ﺩﺭﺟﻪ‬ISO ‫ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ، ﻋﮑﺲ‬ .‫ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺩﻭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ...
Page 131 ‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬ !‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ !‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ، ﮐﻠﻴﻪ‬ .‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ،‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍی‬ISO ،‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫– ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺗﺮ...
Page 132 ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ – ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺭی ﮐﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻢ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ‬ .‫"-" ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ "+" ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ...
Page 133 ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻓﻮﺭی‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮔﺬﺍﺭی‬ Gmail، ،‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ، ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬ ‫ ﺑﻪ‬YouTube ‫ ﻳﺎ‬MMS ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ، ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺑﻪ‬ .‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‬ .‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ: ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﻭﻣﻴﻨﮓ، ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﻭی‬ ‫...
Page 134 ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫– ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﺽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ‬ ،‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ‬ .‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ‬ ،‫ﺷﻮﺩ. ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‬ ،‫– ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ...
Page 135 ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ، ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ‬ .‫ﭼﭗ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ...
Page 136 ‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎی ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫، ﻣﻨﻮی‬LG-C660 ‫ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﻭ‬ ‫ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ﻳﮏ ﻧﻤﺎی ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ‬ .‫ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬...
Page 137 ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ ﻳﺎ‬Gmail ،‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ، ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻋﺎﺩی‬ .‫ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﺑﻨﻮﻳﺴﻴﺪ...
Page 138 .‫ ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬USB :USB ‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ LG-C660 ‫ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻳﮏ ﭘﺨﺶ‬LG-C660 ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫، ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬USB ‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ‬ .‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬...
Page 139 ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ،‫ﺗﺮﺍﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ‬ ،‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻳﮏ‬LG-C660 ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ .‫ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬FM ‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ‬...
Page 140 ‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻟﺰﻭﻣﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ‬ 48 ‫ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ. ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ‬ .‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ...
Page 141 .‫ﺳﭙﺲ = ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ،‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻩ ﺗﺮ، ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ ﺑﻪ‬LG-C660 ،‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ، ﺳﭙﺲ‬...
Page 142 ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﺎی ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺭﻭﻳﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﭼﻪ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ، ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﻳﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ .‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ...
Page 143 ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ: ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺑﺮﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ‬ .‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ، ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ ﻭ‬Microsoft Office ‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ...
Page 144 ‫ﻭﺏ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪی – ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ،‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﺩﻧﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﻧﮕﺎﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ. ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ،‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯی ﻫﺎ، ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ، ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ‬ ،‫ﮐﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﺯﺵ، ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﯽ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ‬ .‫ﺑﻪ...
Page 145 ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ! ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﺏ‬ .‫ﻗﺒﻠﯽ، ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻳﺎﺏ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﻳﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ .‫ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ‬ ،‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ URL ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ، ﺳﭙﺲ ﻳﮏ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ‬ .‫ﺑﺮﺍی...
Page 146 ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎ ﺕ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ – ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ،‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ ﻭ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ...
Page 147 ‫ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ – ﮔﻮﺍﻫﯽ ﻫﺎی‬ .‫ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﺑﺎﺯﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺪ ﭘﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ .‫ﺭﻣﺰﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎی ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ‬ .‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ...
Page 148 ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎ ﺕ‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی‬ .‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک‬ .‫ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩی...
Page 149 Wi-Fi !‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‬ ‫ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﭘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ‬ Wi-Fi ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬AP) ‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ‬ ،‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ‬ .‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬ ‫ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ .‫ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ...
Page 150 Wi-Fi ‫ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬LG-C660 ‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﻳﮏ ﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ‬ .‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ < ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬ < ‫< ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ‬ ‫ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ‬Wi-Fi ‫ﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺖ‬LG-C660 ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ: ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬...
Page 151 ‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬ .‫ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺟﺪی ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﻖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ‬LG :‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻃﺒﻖ‬ ‫ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬LG ‫ﺻﻼﺣﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎی‬...
Page 152 ‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬DivX VOD ‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﻧﺎﻡ، ﺑﺨﺶ‬ .‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻴﺎﺑﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ‬ vod.divx.com ‫ﺗﮑﻤﻴﻞ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻧﺎﻡ، ﺑﻪ‬ .‫ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‬ ‫® ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ‬DivX Certified 320x240 ‫® ﺗﺎ‬DivX ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ DivX®، DivX ‫ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ ‫® ﻭ ﺁﺭﻡ ﻫﺎی‬Certified Rovi ‫ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﻪ،...
Page 153 ‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬ .‫ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬LG-C660 ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ‬ (.‫)ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭی ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺮﺗﯽ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ LG-C660 ‫ﻭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ‬ .‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‬...
Page 154 Suppliers Details Name LG Electronics Inc Address LG Electronics Inc. LG Twin Towers 20, Yeouido-dong, Yeongdeungpo-gu, Seoul, Korea 150-721 Product Details Product Name GSM 850 / E-GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 Quad Band and WCDMA Terminal Equipment...
Page 155 ‫ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺸﮑﻼﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ. ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺸﮑﻼﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﺰﻡ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ، ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ .‫ﺧﻮﺩ...
Page 156 .‫ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﮔﺮﻡ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ، ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ .‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬LG ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ،‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ .‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻧﻘﺺ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی‬...
Page 157 ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ/ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ .‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩی ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ ﻭ ﻋﮑﺲ‬SMS ‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬...
Page 159 LG-C660 LG-C660 User Guide This guide helps you get started using your phone. If you need more information, please visit www.lg.com. • Some of the contents present in this manual may not apply to your phone and it depends on your phone’s software or your service...
Page 160: Table Of Contents
Contents Guidelines for safe and efﬁcient Viewing the status bar ..34 use ..........6 Entering text ......35 Entering accented letters ..36 Important notice ....13 Entering numbers....36 Before using the mobile phone, Google account setup ...37 ﬁrst read! ......22 Creating your Google account ......37 Getting to know your phone .25 Signing in to your Google...
Page 161 Messaging/email ....42 Once you’ve taken the photo ...........49 Messaging ......42 Using the advanced settings Sending a message ....42 ...........50 Threaded box ......43 Viewing your saved photos ...51 Using emoticons ....43 Changing your message Video camera ......52 settings .......43 Getting to know the viewﬁnder Setting up your email ...43 ...........52 Microsoft Exchange email...
Page 162 Contents Timeline view .......56 Recording a sound or voice My Images options menu ..56 ...........63 Sending a photo ....56 Sending the voice recording ..63 Sending a video ....57 The Web ........64 Using an image ....57 Browser .......64 Creating a slideshow ....57 Using options .......64 Checking your photo ....57 Adding and accessing...
Page 163 Accessibility ......68 Date & Time......68 About Phone ......68 Wi-Fi ........69 Turning on Wi-Fi ....69 Connecting to Wi-Fi ....69 USB tethering ......69 Wi-Fi tethering .....70 Software update ....71 Phone Software update ..71 DivX Mobile ..71 Accessories ......73 Technical data.......74 Troubleshooting ....75...
Page 164: Guidelines For Safe And Efﬁcient Use
• While there may be or illegal. differences between the SAR levels of various LG Exposure to radio phone models, they are all frequency energy designed to meet the relevant Radio wave exposure and...
Page 165 It may cause • Repairs under warranty, at an electric shock and can LG’s option, may include seriously damage your phone. replacement parts or boards • Do not charge a handset near that are either new or...
Page 166 Guidelines for safe and efﬁcient use • Use a dry cloth to clean the • Your phone is an electronic exterior of the unit (do not use device that generates heat solvents such as benzene, during normal operation. thinner or alcohol). Extremely prolonged, direct skin contact in the absence •...
Page 167 so that you are aware of Road safety your surroundings. This is Check the laws and regulations particularly imperative when on the use of mobile phones in near roads. the area when you drive. • Do not use a hand-held Avoid damage to your phone while driving.
Page 168 Guidelines for safe and efﬁcient use not touch or attempt to remove. In aircraft Stop using your mobile device Wireless devices can cause until the glass is replaced by an interference in aircraft. authorised service provider. • Turn your mobile phone off before boarding any aircraft.
Page 169 • Do not leave the battery performance. in hot or cold places, this may deteriorate the battery • Use only LG batteries and performance. chargers. LG chargers are designed to maximise the • There is risk of explosion if battery life.
Page 170 Guidelines for safe and efﬁcient use • Always unplug the charger from the wall socket after the phone is fully charged to save unnecessary power consumption of the charger. • Actual battery life will depend on network configuration, product settings, usage patterns, battery and environmental conditions.
Page 171: Important Notice
Important notice Please check to see whether any Tap Uninstall, then touch OK problems you encountered with to uninstall the application your phone are described in this you selected. section before taking the phone 2. Optimising battery life in for service or calling a service Extend your battery's life representative.
Page 172 Important notice • Some applications you source or, if connected to a downloaded may cause your power source, how long you battery’s life to be reduced. were last running on battery power. The body of the screen Checking the battery charge lists applications or services level using battery power, from...
Page 173 WARNING: To protect WARNING: Precautions your phone and personal to take when using pattern data, only download lock. applications from trusted It is very important to sources, such as Android remember the unlock pattern Market. If there are you set. You will not be improperly installed able to access your phone applications on your phone,...
Page 174 Volume down key + Power key battery. for over ten seconds. When Turning Wi-Fi on and screen shows LG logo, release connecting to a Wi-Fi network power key. On the home screen, touch After screen shows hard reset the Applications tab, then screen, release other keys.
Page 175 Touch Wi-Fi to turn it on and microSD memory card into your begin scanning for available phone. Wi-Fi networks. Without inserting a memory • A list of available Wi-Fi card, you cannot save the networks is displayed. pictures and video you take with Secured networks are the camera.
Page 176 9. Copying LG PC Suite switch between several open from an SD card applications. Android manages LG PC Suite IV is a program that each application, stopping and helps you connect your mobile starting them as needed to phone to a PC using a USB data ensure that idle applications communication cable.
Page 177 Installing LG PC Suite from your • Run the LGInstaller.exe file microSD memory card on your PC and follow the instructions. Insert your microSD memory card into your phone. (It may * When LG PC Suite IV already be inserted.)
Page 178 Important notice LG-C660 does not support: mounted as a drive on your computer. You can now copy files - LG Air Sync (Web Sync, to and from the microSD card. R-Click) - OSP (On Screen Phone) 11. Unlocking the screen...
Page 179 To disconnect your phone from 13. When the screen the computer, carefully follow freezes your computer’s instructions If the screen freezes or the for properly disconnecting phone does not respond when USB devices to avoid losing you try to operate it: information on the card.
Page 180: Before Using The Mobile Phone, First Read
Storage > Open Folder To View extensions may damage your Files. phone. If you didn't install LG Android Moving contacts from Platform Driver onto your PC, your old phone to your you must set it manually.
Page 181 If PC Suite IV detects the Press Menu and select Share > Bluetooth. Check whether connection of your LG-C660 phone (using the USB cable), Bluetooth is turned on, then select Scan For Devices. click Sync or Sync Contacts...
Page 182 Before using the mobile phone, ﬁrst read! * Connecting to FTP (only the FTP server is supported on this handset): Select Settings > Wireless & Networks > Bluetooth Settings. Select the Discoverable box; now, you can search for your phone from other devices.
Page 183: Getting To Know Your Phone
TIP! Press the Menu key whenever you tap an application to check what options are available. TIP! The LG-C660 does not support video calls. TIP! If your LG-C660 has errors or you cannot turn it on, remove the battery, reinsert it, then turn it on after 5 seconds.
Page 184 Getting to know your phone Stereo earphone Power/Lock key connector - Turns your phone on/off when you press Volume keys and hold the key. - On the home screen: - Turns the screen off and locks the phone. Controls ringer volume.
Page 185: Installing The Sim Card And Battery
Installing the SIM card and battery To remove the back cover, hold the phone in your hand firmly. With the other hand, firmly press your thumb on the back cover. Now lift off the battery cover. Slide the SIM card into the SIM card slot.
Page 186 Replace the back cover of the phone. NOTE: The battery must be fully charged initially to improve battery lifetime. NOTE: The LG-C660 has an internal antenna. Be careful not to scratch or damage this rear area, as that causes loss of performance.
Page 187: Installing The Memory Card
To insert a memory card: NOTE: The LG-C660 supports memory cards up to 32 GB. Insert the memory card Turn the phone off before into the slot.
Page 188: Formatting The Memory Card
Getting to know your phone Formatting the memory card Your memory card may already be formatted. If it isn’t, you must format it before you can use it. NOTE: All files on the card are deleted when you format the card. On the home screen, touch Close the back cover.
Page 189: Your Home Screen
Lock your phone Here are some tips on how to When you are not using the navigate around your phone. LG-C660, press the power key to lock your phone. This helps Touch – To choose a menu/ prevent accidental presses and option or open an application, saves battery power.
Page 190: Unlock Screen
NOTE: Some screen images may be different depending on your Unlock screen phone provider. Whenever your LG-C660 is not On your LG home screen, you in use, it returns to the lock can view quick keys at the screen. Drag your finger from bottom of the screen.
Page 191: Adding Widgets To Your Home Screen
You then see a new folder’s Touch the Message icon to access the messaging menu. icon on the home screen. This is where you can create a Drag it to the desired location new message. on the desired panel, then take your finger off the Touch the Applications tab screen.
Page 192: Notiﬁcation Drawer
Your home screen Touch an icon to open its Viewing the status bar application. Or, touch the The status bar uses different Back key to return to the icons to display phone current application. information, such as signal strength, new messages, battery Notification drawer life and active Bluetooth and The notification drawer runs...
Page 193: Entering Text
Icon Description Icon Description Missed call Upload Bluetooth on GPS is acquiring Bluetooth connected GPS is on System warning Entering text Alarm Qwerty keyboard New voicemail Shift key – Press once to capitalise the next letter you Airplane mode type. Double-press for All Caps. Silent Number and Symbols key –...
Page 194: Entering Accented Letters
Your home screen Virtual keyboard • Qwerty keyboard: Press the same key repeatedly until Use the virtual keyboard by you see the special character holding your phone horizontally. you want. To display the keyboard, touch a text field. Entering numbers Tap to change between Press to add one number.
Page 195: Google Account Setup
Google account setup The first time you open the information about your Google application on your account. Wait while the server phone, you are required to sign creates your account. in with your existing Google Signing in to your Google account.
Page 196 Google account setup IMPORTANT • If you have an enterprise account through your • Some applications, such as company or other Calendar, work only with the organisation, your IT first Google Account you add. department may have special If you plan to use more than instructions on how to sign in one Google Account on your to that account.
Page 197: Calls
Calls Making a call Answering and rejecting a call Touch to open the keypad. When your phone rings, drag the Answer icon to the right. Enter the number using the keypad. To delete a digit, Drag the Decline icon to the touch the Clear icon left to reject an incoming call.
Page 198: Viewing Your Call Logs
Calls Both calls are displayed on TIP! Press the Menu the call screen. Your initial call key, then touch Clear Call is locked and put on hold. Log to delete all the recorded Touch to toggle between items. calls. Or touch to make a Call settings conference call.
Page 199: Contacts
Contacts Add contacts to your phone details about your contact. and synchronise them with the Touch Save. contacts in your Google account Favourite contacts or other accounts that support contact syncing. You can classify frequently called contacts as favourites. Searching for a contact Adding a contact to your On the home screen favourites...
Page 200: Messaging/Email
Messaging/email Touch Send to send your Messaging message. Your LG-C660 combines SMS Responses appear on the and MMS into one intuitive, screen. As you view and easy-to-use menu. send additional messages, a Sending a message message thread is created. Touch the icon, then touch New Message.
Page 201: Threaded Box
Insert Smiley. Others. Changing your message Microsoft Exchange settings email account Your LG-C660 message settings Email Address – Enter the email are predefined so you can send address. messages immediately. You can User Name – Enter the change the settings based on account’s user name.
Page 202: Other (Pop3, Imap) Email Account
Messaging/email Use SSL – Choose whether to Choose whether to enable use SSL for Microsoft Exchange. push email. Once enabled, it immediately connects to the Sync Contacts – Choose server. whether to synchronize Contacts of the Microsoft Exchange The Setup Complete screen account.
Page 203: Composing And Sending Email
You can touch an account to Touch Attach to attach a file view its Inbox. The account from you want to send with your which you send email by default message. is indicated with a checkmark. Touch Send. If you’re not ready to send Composing and sending the message, touch the Menu email...
Page 204: Working With Account Folders
Messaging/email Please note that messages sent Working with account using an Exchange account are folders not located on the phone; they Each account has Inbox, are located on the Exchange Outbox, Sent and Drafts folders. server itself. Depending on the features If you want to see your sent supported by your account’s messages in the Sent folder (or...
Page 205 To change account settings: Open Email, Select Menu key > Settings. To change individual account settings select the account you want to edit. Incoming Server – Enter the incoming email server address. Port Number – Displays incoming server port number. Secure Type –...
Page 206: Camera
Camera Getting to know the viewfinder Brightness – This defines and controls the amount of light entering the image. Slide the brightness indicator along the bar towards “-” for less brightness, or towards “+” for more brightness. Zoom – Zoom in or zoom out. Alternatively, you can use the side volume keys.
Page 207: Taking A Quick Photo
TIP! Close all shortcut options Once you’ve taken the to give a clearer viewfinder photo screen. Touch the centre of the Your captured photo appears on viewfinder once. To display the the screen. options, touch the screen again. Touch to share your Share photo using Bluetooth, Taking a quick photo...
Page 208: Using The Advanced Settings
Camera Timer – The self-timer allows Using the advanced you to set a delay after the settings shutter is pressed. Select Off, In the viewfinder, touch 3 Seconds, 5 Seconds, or 10 open all advanced options. Seconds. This is ideal if you Change camera settings by want to be in the photo.
Page 209: Viewing Your Saved Photos
NOTE: This function is only Viewing your saved available when GPS is active. photos Reset – Restore all camera Access your saved photos default settings. while in Camera mode. Just touch and touch – Touch whenever you on any photo. You then see want to know how this function Slideshow and Menu.
Page 210: Video Camera
Video camera Getting to know the viewfinder Brightness – This defines and controls the amount of light entering the video. Slide the brightness indicator along the bar towards “-” for less brightness, or towards “+” for more brightness. Zoom – Zoom in or out. Alternatively, you can use the side volume keys.
Page 211: Shooting A Quick Video
NOTE: Additional charges may Shooting a quick video apply when MMS messages are Slide the Camera mode downloaded while roaming. button down and the icon changes to Touch to edit the name Rename of the selected video. The video camera’s viewfinder appears on the screen.
Page 212: Watching Your Saved Videos
Video camera White Balance – White balance Watching your saved ensures that the white areas videos in your video are realistic. To In the viewfinder, touch enable your camera to adjust Your gallery appears on the the white balance correctly, screen.
Page 213: Your Photos And Videos
Your photos and videos Adjusting the volume when viewing a video To adjust the volume of a video while it is playing, use the volume keys on the left side of the phone. Setting a photo as wallpaper Touch the photo you want to set as wallpaper to open it.
Page 214: Multimedia
Multimedia You can store multimedia files Timeline view to a memory card to have easy LG-C660 Gallery provides a access to all your image and timeline view of your photos and video files. videos. In Grid View mode, drag Touch the Applications tab, then to the right and the date select Gallery.
Page 215: Sending A Video
Choose images to use as To transfer files using USB wallpaper or to identify callers. devices: Touch and hold, then select Connect the LG-C660 to a PC Set As from More menu. using a USB cable. Choose from Contact Icon, or If you haven't installed LG Wallpaper.
Page 216: Music
Without a SD card, you twice to return to the cannot use USB mass storage. previous song. NOTE: If you installed LG Android To change the volume while Platform Driver, you immediately listening to music, press the up...
Page 217: Using The Radio
If there are preset channels, you see a pop-up asking Using the radio "Reset all channels and start Your LG-C660 has a built-in FM auto scan?". If you choose radio so you can tune in to your OK, all the preset channels...
Page 218: Listening To The Radio
Multimedia Listening to the radio Touch the speaker Icon which is at the left top in the radio screen to listen to radio via speaker. TIP! To improve radio reception, extend the headset cord, which functions as the radio antenna. WARNING: If you connect a headset not specifically made for radio...
Page 219: Utilities
Touch to turn Adding an event to your on/off the alarm. After you set calendar the time, the LG-C660 lets On the home screen, touch you know how much time is the Applications tab and left before the alarm sounds.
Page 220: Changing Your Calendar View
Utilities If you want to add a note to Polaris Viewer your event, touch Description Polaris Viewer is a professional and enter the details. mobile office solution that lets If you want to repeat the users conveniently view various alarm, set Repetition, and set types of office documents, Reminders, if necessary.
Page 221: Voice Recorder
Voice recorder Sending the voice recording Use the voice recorder to record voice memos or other audio files. Once you have finished recording, you can send the Recording a sound or voice audio clip by touching the On the home screen, touch Menu key and Share.
Page 222: The Web
The Web current page. This is the Browser opposite of what happens Browser gives you a fast, full- when you press the Back colour world of games, music, key, which goes to the news, sports, entertainment and previous page. much more, right on your mobile More phone.
Page 223: Adding And Accessing Bookmarks
TIP! To return to the previous Web page, press the Back key. Adding and accessing bookmarks Press the Menu key, then select Bookmarks. Touch the first item, Add, then enter a name for the bookmark followed by its URL To access the bookmark, simply touch it.
Page 224: Settings
Settings Auto-Rotate Screen – Set to Wireless & Networks switch orientation automatically Here, you can manage Wi-Fi and when you rotate the phone. Bluetooth. You can share your Animation – Set to display an phone’s mobile data connection animation. via USB or as a portable Wi-Fi hotspot, set up Virtual Private Screen Timeout –...
Page 225: Applications
set PIN or Password instead of Applications Pattern or leave it as None. You can manage applications When you turn on your phone and set up quick launch or wake up the screen, you're shortcuts. asked to draw your unlock Unknown Sources –...
Page 226: Privacy
Settings Privacy Voice Input & Output You can reset the phone to Use the Text-to-Speech settings factory data settings. Be careful, to configure the Android text- as this deletes all your data. to-speech synthesiser for applications use it. Storage Accessibility Change USB connection mode.
Page 227: Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi With Wi-Fi, you can use high- TIP! speed Internet access within the If your phone goes into Sleep coverage of the wireless access mode when connected to point (AP). Wi-Fi, the Wi-Fi connection is Enjoy wireless Internet using automatically disabled. Wi-Fi, without extra charges.
Page 228: Wi-Fi Tethering
Wi-Fi Wi-Fi tethering Use your LG-C660 as portable Wi-Fi hotspot. Settings > Wireless & Network > Tethering & Portable Hotspot > Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot NOTE: The LG-C660 supports WEP, WPA/WPA2-PSK and 802.1x EAP security. If your Wi- Fi service provider or network...
Page 229: Software Update
Software update upgrade may seriously damage Phone Software update your mobile phone. LG Mobile Phone Software NOTE: LG reserves the right to update from internet make firmware updates available For more information on using only for selective models at its...
Page 230 Software update Go to vod.divx.com for more information on how to complete your registration. ® ® DivX Certified to play DivX video up to 320x240 ® ® DivX , DivX Certified and associated logos are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under license.
Page 231: Accessories
Accessories These Accessories are available for use with the LG-C660. (Items described below may be optional.) Travel Data cable Adapter Connect your LG-C660 and Battery User Guide Learn more about your LG-C660. Stereo headset NOTE: • Always use genuine LG accessories.
Page 232: Technical Data
Suppliers Details Name LG Electronics Inc Address LG Electronics Inc. LG Twin Towers 20, Yeouido-dong, Yeongdeungpo-gu, Seoul, Korea 150-721 Product Details Product Name GSM 850 / E-GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 Quad Band and WCDMA Terminal Equipment...
Page 233: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting This chapter lists some problems you might encounter while using your phone. Some problems require you to call your service provider, but most are easy to correct yourself. Message Possible causes Possible Corrective Measures There is no USIM card in the phone Make sure that the SIM card is correctly USIM error or it is inserted...
Page 234 No voltage Plug into a different socket. Charger defective If the charger does not warm up, replace Wrong charger Only use original LG accessories. Battery defective Replace battery. The Fixed Dial Number not Number function Check call settings.
Page 235 Message Possible causes Possible Corrective Measures Impossible to Delete some existing messages in the receive/ send Memory Full phone. SMS & Picture Unsupported file Check the file format that can be Files not open format supported SD Card not FAT 16 file system Check SD card file system via card reader working supported only...

LG C660 User Manual

Quick Links

Related Manuals for LG C660

Summary of Contents for LG C660

Table of Contents